xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 911b8eac)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322  *	status changed.
323  *
324  */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358 
359 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361 
362 /*
363  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365  * filtering will be disabled.
366  */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368 
369 /**
370  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
377  */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 	RSSI_EVENT,
380 	MLME_EVENT,
381 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384 
385 /**
386  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389  */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394 
395 /**
396  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398  */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402 
403 /**
404  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409  */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 	AUTH_EVENT,
412 	ASSOC_EVENT,
413 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416 
417 /**
418  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422  */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 	MLME_SUCCESS,
425 	MLME_DENIED,
426 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428 
429 /**
430  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434  */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 	u16 reason;
439 };
440 
441 /**
442  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444  * @tid: the tid
445  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446  */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 	u16 tid;
450 	u16 ssn;
451 };
452 
453 /**
454  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459  * @u:union holding the fields above
460  */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 	union {
464 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 	} u;
468 };
469 
470 /**
471  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472  *
473  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474  *
475  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477  */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482 
483 /**
484  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485  *
486  * @lci: LCI subelement content
487  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488  * @lci_len: LCI data length
489  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490  */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 	const u8 *lci;
493 	const u8 *civicloc;
494 	size_t lci_len;
495 	size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497 
498 /**
499  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501  *
502  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504  */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 	u32 min_interval;
507 	u32 max_interval;
508 };
509 
510 /**
511  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512  *
513  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515  *
516  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520  *	ACK, BACK or both
521  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529  * @assoc: association status
530  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531  *	or not
532  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558  *	the current band.
559  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
574  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589  *	your driver/device needs to do.
590  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
596  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612  *	station.
613  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614  *	responder functionality.
615  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
622  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
625  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
626  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
627  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
628  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
629  *	interval.
630  */
631 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
632 	const u8 *bssid;
633 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
634 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
635 	bool uora_exists;
636 	bool ack_enabled;
637 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
638 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
639 	bool he_support;
640 	bool twt_requester;
641 	bool twt_responder;
642 	bool twt_protected;
643 	/* association related data */
644 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
645 	bool ibss_creator;
646 	u16 aid;
647 	/* erp related data */
648 	bool use_cts_prot;
649 	bool use_short_preamble;
650 	bool use_short_slot;
651 	bool enable_beacon;
652 	u8 dtim_period;
653 	u16 beacon_int;
654 	u16 assoc_capability;
655 	u64 sync_tsf;
656 	u32 sync_device_ts;
657 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
658 	u32 basic_rates;
659 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
660 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
661 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
662 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
663 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
664 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
665 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
666 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
667 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
668 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
669 	int arp_addr_cnt;
670 	bool qos;
671 	bool idle;
672 	bool ps;
673 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
674 	size_t ssid_len;
675 	bool hidden_ssid;
676 	int txpower;
677 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
678 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
679 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
680 	u16 max_idle_period;
681 	bool protected_keep_alive;
682 	bool ftm_responder;
683 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
684 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
685 	bool nontransmitted;
686 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
687 	u8 bssid_index;
688 	u8 bssid_indicator;
689 	bool ema_ap;
690 	u8 profile_periodicity;
691 	struct {
692 		u32 params;
693 		u16 nss_set;
694 	} he_oper;
695 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
696 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
697 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
698 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
699 };
700 
701 /**
702  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
703  *
704  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
705  *
706  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
707  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
708  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
709  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
710  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
711  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
712  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
713  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
714  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
715  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
716  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
717  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
718  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
720  *	station
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
722  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
724  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
726  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
727  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
728  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
729  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
730  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
731  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
732  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
733  *	hardware queue.
734  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
736  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
738  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
740  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
741  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
742  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
743  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
744  *	off-channel operation.
745  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
746  *	(header conversion)
747  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
748  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
750  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
752  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
753  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
755  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
756  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
757  *	queue gets full.
758  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
759  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
760  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
761  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
762  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
763  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
765  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
766  *	status to user space)
767  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
768  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
769  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
770  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
771  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
772  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
773  *	handled properly by the device.
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
775  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
776  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
777  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
778  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
779  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
780  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
781  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
782  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
783  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
784  *	PS-Poll responses.
785  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
786  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
787  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
788  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
789  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
790  *	monitor injection).
791  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
792  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
793  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
794  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
795  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
796  *
797  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
798  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
799  */
800 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
804 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
805 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
806 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
807 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
808 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
809 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
810 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
811 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
812 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
832 };
833 
834 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
835 
836 /**
837  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
838  *
839  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
840  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
841  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
842  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
843  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
844  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
845  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
846  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
847  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
848  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
849  *	it can be sent out.
850  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
851  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
852  *
853  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
854  */
855 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
856 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
857 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
858 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
859 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
860 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
861 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
862 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
863 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
864 };
865 
866 /*
867  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
868  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
869  */
870 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
871 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
872 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
873 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
874 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
875 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
876 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
877 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
878 
879 /**
880  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
881  *	Rate Control algorithm.
882  *
883  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
884  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
885  *
886  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
887  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
888  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
889  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
890  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
891  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
892  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
893  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
894  *	Greenfield mode.
895  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
896  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
897  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
898  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
899  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
900  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
901  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
902  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
903  */
904 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
905 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
906 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
907 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
908 
909 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
910 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
911 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
912 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
913 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
914 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
915 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
916 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
917 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
918 };
919 
920 
921 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
922 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
923 
924 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
925 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
926 
927 /* maximum number of rate stages */
928 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
929 
930 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
931 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
932 
933 /**
934  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
935  *
936  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
937  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
938  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
939  *
940  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
941  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
942  *
943  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
944  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
945  *
946  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
947  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
948  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
949  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
950  * information::
951  *
952  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
953  *
954  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
955  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
956  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
957  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
958  * information should then contain::
959  *
960  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
961  *
962  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
963  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
964  */
965 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
966 	s8 idx;
967 	u16 count:5,
968 	    flags:11;
969 } __packed;
970 
971 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
972 
973 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
974 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
975 {
976 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
977 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
978 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
979 }
980 
981 static inline u8
982 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
983 {
984 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
985 }
986 
987 static inline u8
988 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
989 {
990 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
991 }
992 
993 /**
994  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
995  *
996  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
997  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
998  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
999  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1000  *
1001  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1002  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1003  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1004  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1005  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1006  * @control: union part for control data
1007  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1008  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1009  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1010  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1011  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1012  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1013  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1014  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1015  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1016  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1017  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1018  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1019  * @pad: padding
1020  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1021  * @status: union part for status data
1022  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1023  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1024  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1025  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1026  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1027  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1028  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1029  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1030  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1031  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1032  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1033  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1034  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1035  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1036  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1037  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1038  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1039  */
1040 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1041 	/* common information */
1042 	u32 flags;
1043 	u32 band:3,
1044 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1045 	    hw_queue:4,
1046 	    tx_time_est:10;
1047 	/* 2 free bits */
1048 
1049 	union {
1050 		struct {
1051 			union {
1052 				/* rate control */
1053 				struct {
1054 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1055 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1056 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1057 					u8 use_rts:1;
1058 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1059 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1060 					u8 skip_table:1;
1061 					/* 2 bytes free */
1062 				};
1063 				/* only needed before rate control */
1064 				unsigned long jiffies;
1065 			};
1066 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1067 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1068 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1069 			u32 flags;
1070 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1071 		} control;
1072 		struct {
1073 			u64 cookie;
1074 		} ack;
1075 		struct {
1076 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1077 			s32 ack_signal;
1078 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1079 			u8 ampdu_len;
1080 			u8 antenna;
1081 			u16 tx_time;
1082 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1083 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1084 		} status;
1085 		struct {
1086 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1087 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1088 			u8 pad[4];
1089 
1090 			void *rate_driver_data[
1091 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1092 		};
1093 		void *driver_data[
1094 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1095 	};
1096 };
1097 
1098 static inline u16
1099 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1100 {
1101 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1102 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1103 	 */
1104 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1105 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1106 }
1107 
1108 static inline u16
1109 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1110 {
1111 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1112 }
1113 
1114 /**
1115  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1116  *
1117  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1118  * @info: Basic tx status information
1119  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1120  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1121  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1122  */
1123 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1124 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1125 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1126 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1127 	struct rate_info *rate;
1128 	struct list_head *free_list;
1129 };
1130 
1131 /**
1132  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1133  *
1134  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1135  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1136  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1137  *
1138  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1139  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1140  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1141  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1142  */
1143 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1144 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1145 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1146 	const u8 *common_ies;
1147 	size_t common_ie_len;
1148 };
1149 
1150 
1151 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1152 {
1153 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1154 }
1155 
1156 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1157 {
1158 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1159 }
1160 
1161 /**
1162  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1163  *
1164  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1165  *
1166  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1167  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1168  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1169  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1170  *
1171  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1172  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1173  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1174  */
1175 static inline void
1176 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1177 {
1178 	int i;
1179 
1180 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1181 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1182 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1183 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1184 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1185 	/* clear the rate counts */
1186 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1187 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1188 
1189 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1190 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1191 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1192 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1193 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1194 }
1195 
1196 
1197 /**
1198  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1199  *
1200  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1201  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1202  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1203  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1204  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1205  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1206  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1207  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1208  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1209  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1210  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1211  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1212  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1213  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1214  *	de-duplication by itself.
1215  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1216  *	the frame.
1217  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1218  *	the frame.
1219  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1220  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1221  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1222  *	merging.
1223  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1224  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1225  *	(including FCS) was received.
1226  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1227  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1228  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1229  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1230  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1231  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1232  *	each A-MPDU
1233  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1234  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1235  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1236  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1237  *	on this subframe
1238  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1239  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1240  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1241  *	done by the hardware
1242  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1243  *	processing it in any regular way.
1244  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1245  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1246  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1247  *	monitor interfaces.
1248  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1249  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1250  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1251  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1252  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1253  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1254  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1255  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1256  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1257  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1258  *	interleaved with other frames.
1259  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1260  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1261  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1262  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1263  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1264  *	the first subframe.
1265  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1266  *	be done in the hardware.
1267  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1268  *	frame
1269  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1270  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1271  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1272  *
1273  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1274  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1275  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1276  *	 - DATA5_GI
1277  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1278  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1279  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1280  *
1281  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1282  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1283  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1284  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1285  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1286  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1287  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1288  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1289  */
1290 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1291 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1292 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1293 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1294 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1295 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1296 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1297 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1298 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1299 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1300 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1301 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1302 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1303 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1304 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1305 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1306 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1307 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1308 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1309 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1310 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1311 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1312 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1313 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1314 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1315 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1316 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1317 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1318 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1319 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1320 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1321 };
1322 
1323 /**
1324  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1325  *
1326  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1327  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1328  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1329  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1330  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1331  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1332  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1333  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1334  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1335  */
1336 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1337 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1338 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1339 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1340 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1341 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1342 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1343 };
1344 
1345 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1346 
1347 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1348 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1349 	RX_ENC_HT,
1350 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1351 	RX_ENC_HE,
1352 };
1353 
1354 /**
1355  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1356  *
1357  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1358  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1359  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1360  *
1361  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1362  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1363  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1364  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1365  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1366  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1367  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1368  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1369  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1370  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1371  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1372  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1373  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1374  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1375  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1376  *	values were filled.
1377  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1378  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1379  * @antenna: antenna used
1380  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1381  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1382  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1383  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1384  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1385  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1386  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1387  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1388  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1389  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1390  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1391  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1392  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1393  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1394  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1395  */
1396 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1397 	u64 mactime;
1398 	u64 boottime_ns;
1399 	u32 device_timestamp;
1400 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1401 	u32 flag;
1402 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1403 	u8 enc_flags;
1404 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1405 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1406 	u8 rate_idx;
1407 	u8 nss;
1408 	u8 rx_flags;
1409 	u8 band;
1410 	u8 antenna;
1411 	s8 signal;
1412 	u8 chains;
1413 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1414 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1415 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1416 };
1417 
1418 static inline u32
1419 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1420 {
1421 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1422 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1423 }
1424 
1425 /**
1426  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1427  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1428  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1429  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1430  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1431  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1432  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1433  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1434  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1435  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1436  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1437  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1438  *	@data field.
1439  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1440  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1441  *	length
1442  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1443  *
1444  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1445  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1446  * data.
1447  */
1448 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1449 	u32 present;
1450 	u8 align;
1451 	u8 oui[3];
1452 	u8 subns;
1453 	u8 pad;
1454 	u16 len;
1455 	u8 data[];
1456 } __packed;
1457 
1458 /**
1459  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1460  *
1461  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1462  *
1463  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1464  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1465  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1466  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1467  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1468  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1469  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1470  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1471  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1472  *	for more.
1473  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1474  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1475  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1476  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1477  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1478  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1479  *	operating channel.
1480  */
1481 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1482 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1483 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1484 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1485 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1486 };
1487 
1488 
1489 /**
1490  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1491  *
1492  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1493  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1494  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1495  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1496  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1497  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1498  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1499  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1500  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1501  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1502  */
1503 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1504 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1505 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1506 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1507 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1508 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1509 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1510 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1511 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1512 };
1513 
1514 /**
1515  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1516  *
1517  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1518  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1519  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1520  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1521  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1522  */
1523 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1524 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1525 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1526 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1527 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1528 
1529 	/* keep last */
1530 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1531 };
1532 
1533 /**
1534  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1535  *
1536  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1537  *
1538  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1539  *
1540  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1541  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1542  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1543  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1544  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1545  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1546  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1547  *
1548  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1549  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1550  *
1551  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1552  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1553  *
1554  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1555  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1556  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1557  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1558  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1559  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1560  *
1561  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1562  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1563  *	configured for an HT channel.
1564  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1565  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1566  */
1567 struct ieee80211_conf {
1568 	u32 flags;
1569 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1570 
1571 	u16 listen_interval;
1572 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1573 
1574 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1575 
1576 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1577 	bool radar_enabled;
1578 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1579 };
1580 
1581 /**
1582  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1583  *
1584  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1585  * operation.
1586  *
1587  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1588  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1589  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1590  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1591  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1592  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1593  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1594  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1595  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1596  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1597  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1598   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1599   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1600  */
1601 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1602 	u64 timestamp;
1603 	u32 device_timestamp;
1604 	bool block_tx;
1605 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1606 	u8 count;
1607 	u32 delay;
1608 };
1609 
1610 /**
1611  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1612  *
1613  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1614  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1615  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1616  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1617  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1618  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1619  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1620  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1621  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1622  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1623  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1624  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1625  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1626  */
1627 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1628 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1629 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1630 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1631 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1632 };
1633 
1634 
1635 /**
1636  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1637  *
1638  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1639  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1640  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1641  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1642  */
1643 
1644 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1645 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1646 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1647 };
1648 
1649 /**
1650  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1651  *
1652  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1653  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1654  *
1655  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1656  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1657  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1658  * @addr: address of this interface
1659  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1660  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1661  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1662  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1663  *	for read access.
1664  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1665  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1666  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1667  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1668  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1669  * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1670  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1671  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1672  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1673  *	restrictions.
1674  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1675  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1676  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1677  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1678  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1679  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1680  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1681  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1682  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1683  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1684  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1685  *	interface.
1686  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1687  *	for this interface.
1688  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1689  *	sizeof(void \*).
1690  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1691  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1692  *	protected by fq->lock.
1693  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1694  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1695  */
1696 struct ieee80211_vif {
1697 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1698 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1699 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1700 	bool p2p;
1701 	bool csa_active;
1702 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1703 
1704 	u8 cab_queue;
1705 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1706 
1707 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1708 
1709 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1710 
1711 	u32 driver_flags;
1712 	u32 offload_flags;
1713 
1714 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1715 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1716 #endif
1717 
1718 	bool probe_req_reg;
1719 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1720 
1721 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1722 
1723 	/* must be last */
1724 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1725 };
1726 
1727 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1728 {
1729 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1730 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1731 #endif
1732 	return false;
1733 }
1734 
1735 /**
1736  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1737  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1738  *
1739  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1740  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1741  *
1742  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1743  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1744  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1745  */
1746 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1747 
1748 /**
1749  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1750  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1751  *
1752  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1753  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1754  *
1755  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1756  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1757  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1758  */
1759 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1760 
1761 /**
1762  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1763  *
1764  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1765  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1766  *
1767  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1768  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1769  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1770  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1771  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1772  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1773  *	generation in software.
1774  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1775  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1776  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1777  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1778  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1779  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1780  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1781  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1782  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1783  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1784  *	MIC.
1785  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1786  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1787  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1788  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1789  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1790  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1791  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1792  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1793  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1794  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1795  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1796  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1797  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1798  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1799  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1800  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1801  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1802  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1803  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1804  *	generation only
1805  */
1806 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1807 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1808 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1809 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1810 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1811 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1812 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1813 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1814 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1815 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1816 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1817 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1818 };
1819 
1820 /**
1821  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1822  *
1823  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1824  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1825  *
1826  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1827  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1828  *	encrypted in hardware.
1829  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1830  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1831  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1832  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1833  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1834  * @keylen: key material length
1835  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1836  * 	data block:
1837  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1838  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1839  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1840  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1841  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1842  */
1843 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1844 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1845 	u32 cipher;
1846 	u8 icv_len;
1847 	u8 iv_len;
1848 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1849 	s8 keyidx;
1850 	u16 flags;
1851 	u8 keylen;
1852 	u8 key[];
1853 };
1854 
1855 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1856 
1857 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1858 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1859 
1860 /**
1861  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1862  *
1863  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1864  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1865  *	reverse order than in packet)
1866  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1867  *	reverse order than in packet)
1868  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1869  *	reverse order than in packet)
1870  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1871  *	reverse order than in packet)
1872  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1873  */
1874 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1875 	union {
1876 		struct {
1877 			u32 iv32;
1878 			u16 iv16;
1879 		} tkip;
1880 		struct {
1881 			u8 pn[6];
1882 		} ccmp;
1883 		struct {
1884 			u8 pn[6];
1885 		} aes_cmac;
1886 		struct {
1887 			u8 pn[6];
1888 		} aes_gmac;
1889 		struct {
1890 			u8 pn[6];
1891 		} gcmp;
1892 		struct {
1893 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1894 			u8 seq_len;
1895 		} hw;
1896 	};
1897 };
1898 
1899 /**
1900  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1901  *
1902  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1903  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1904  *
1905  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1906  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1907  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1908  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1909  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1910  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1911  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1912  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1913  *     key_idx value calculation:
1914  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1915  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1916  */
1917 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1918 	u32 cipher;
1919 	u16 iftype;
1920 	u8 hdr_len;
1921 	u8 pn_len;
1922 	u8 pn_off;
1923 	u8 key_idx_off;
1924 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1925 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1926 	u8 mic_len;
1927 };
1928 
1929 /**
1930  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1931  *
1932  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1933  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1934  *
1935  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1936  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1937  */
1938 enum set_key_cmd {
1939 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1940 };
1941 
1942 /**
1943  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1944  *
1945  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1946  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1947  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1948  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1949  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1950  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1951  */
1952 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1953 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1954 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1955 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1956 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1957 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1958 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1959 };
1960 
1961 /**
1962  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1963  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1964  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1965  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1966  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1967  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1968  *
1969  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1970  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1971  */
1972 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1973 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1974 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1975 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1976 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1977 };
1978 
1979 /**
1980  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1981  *
1982  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1983  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1984  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1985  */
1986 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1987 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1988 	struct {
1989 		s8 idx;
1990 		u8 count;
1991 		u8 count_cts;
1992 		u8 count_rts;
1993 		u16 flags;
1994 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1995 };
1996 
1997 /**
1998  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1999  *
2000  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2001  *
2002  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2003  *	to the STA.
2004  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2005  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2006  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2007  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2008  *	per peer TPC.
2009  */
2010 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2011 	s16 power;
2012 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2013 };
2014 
2015 /**
2016  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2017  *
2018  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2019  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2020  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2021  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2022  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2023  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2024  *
2025  * @addr: MAC address
2026  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2027  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2028  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2029  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2030  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2031  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2032  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2033  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2034  *	Can be modified by driver.
2035  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2036  *	otherwise always false)
2037  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2038  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2039  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2040  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2041  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2042  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2043  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2044  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2045  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2046  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2047  *	the station moves to associated state.
2048  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2049  * @rates: rate control selection table
2050  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2051  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2052  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2053  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2054  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2055  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2056  *	unlimited.
2057  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2058  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2059  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2060  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2061  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2062  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2063  */
2064 struct ieee80211_sta {
2065 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2066 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2067 	u16 aid;
2068 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2069 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2070 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2071 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2072 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2073 	bool wme;
2074 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2075 	u8 max_sp;
2076 	u8 rx_nss;
2077 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2078 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2079 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2080 	bool tdls;
2081 	bool tdls_initiator;
2082 	bool mfp;
2083 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2084 
2085 	/**
2086 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2087 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2088 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2089 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2090 	 *
2091 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2092 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2093 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2094 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2095 	 *
2096 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2097 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2098 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2099 	 */
2100 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2101 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2102 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2103 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2104 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2105 
2106 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2107 
2108 	/* must be last */
2109 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2110 };
2111 
2112 /**
2113  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2114  *
2115  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2116  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2117  *
2118  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2119  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2120  */
2121 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2122 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2123 };
2124 
2125 /**
2126  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2127  *
2128  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2129  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2130  */
2131 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2132 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2133 };
2134 
2135 /**
2136  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2137  *
2138  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2139  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2140  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2141  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2142  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2143  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2144  *
2145  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2146  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2147  */
2148 struct ieee80211_txq {
2149 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2150 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2151 	u8 tid;
2152 	u8 ac;
2153 
2154 	/* must be last */
2155 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2156 };
2157 
2158 /**
2159  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2160  *
2161  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2162  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2163  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2164  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2165  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2166  *
2167  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2168  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2169  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2170  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2171  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2172  *	algorithm.
2173  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2174  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2175  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2176  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2177  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2178  *	CCK frames.
2179  *
2180  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2181  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2182  *	the FCS at the end.
2183  *
2184  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2185  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2186  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2187  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2188  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2189  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2190  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2191  *
2192  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2193  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2194  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2195  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2198  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2199  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2200  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2203  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2204  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2205  *
2206  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2207  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2208  *
2209  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2210  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2211  *
2212  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2213  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2214  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2215  *
2216  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2217  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2218  *
2219  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2220  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2223  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2224  *	the stack.
2225  *
2226  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2227  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2228  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2229  *
2230  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2231  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2232  *	dtim_period).
2233  *
2234  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2235  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2236  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2237  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2238  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2239  *	only in that case.
2240  *
2241  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2242  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2243  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2244  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2245  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2246  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2249  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2250  *	software.
2251  *
2252  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2253  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2254  *	active interfaces.
2255  *
2256  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2257  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2258  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2259  *
2260  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2261  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2262  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2263  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2264  *	supported cipher suites.
2265  *
2266  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2267  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2268  *	for frames.
2269  *
2270  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2271  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2272  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2273  *	control for more details.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2276  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2277  *
2278  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2279  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2280  *	is supported.
2281  *
2282  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2283  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2284  *
2285  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2286  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2287  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2288  *
2289  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2290  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2291  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2292  *	CSA frame.
2293  *
2294  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2295  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2296  *
2297  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2298  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2299  *
2300  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2301  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2302  *
2303  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2304  *	within A-MPDU.
2305  *
2306  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2307  *	for sent beacons.
2308  *
2309  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2310  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2311  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2312  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2313  *
2314  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2315  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2316  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2317  *	timeout.
2318  *
2319  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2320  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2321  *
2322  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2323  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2324  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2325  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2326  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2327  *
2328  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2329  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2330  *
2331  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2332  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2333  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2334  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2335  *
2336  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2337  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2338  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2339  *
2340  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2341  *	TDLS links.
2342  *
2343  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2344  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2345  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2346  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2347  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2348  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2349  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2350  *
2351  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2352  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2353  *
2354  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2355  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2356  *
2357  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2358  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2359  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2360  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2361  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2362  *
2363  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2364  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2365  *	TXQs to start with.
2366  *
2367  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2368  *	length in tx status information
2369  *
2370  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2371  *
2372  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2373  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2374  *
2375  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2376  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2377  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2378  *
2379  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2380  *	offload
2381  *
2382  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2383  */
2384 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2385 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2386 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2387 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2388 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2389 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2390 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2391 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2392 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2393 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2394 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2395 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2396 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2397 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2398 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2399 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2400 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2401 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2402 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2403 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2404 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2405 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2406 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2407 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2408 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2409 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2410 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2411 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2412 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2413 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2414 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2415 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2416 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2417 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2418 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2419 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2420 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2421 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2422 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2423 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2424 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2425 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2426 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2427 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2428 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2429 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2430 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2431 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2432 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2433 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2434 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2435 
2436 	/* keep last, obviously */
2437 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2438 };
2439 
2440 /**
2441  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2442  *
2443  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2444  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2445  *
2446  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2447  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2448  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2449  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2450  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2451  *
2452  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2453  *
2454  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2455  *	along with this structure.
2456  *
2457  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2458  *
2459  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2460  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2461  *
2462  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2463  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2464  *
2465  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2466  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2467  *
2468  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2469  *	that HW supports
2470  *
2471  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2472  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2473  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2474  *
2475  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2476  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2477  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2478  *
2479  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2480  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2481  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2482  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2483  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2484  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2485  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2486  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2487  *
2488  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2489  *	can handle.
2490  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2491  *	the hw can report back.
2492  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2493  *
2494  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2495  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2496  *	aggregation.
2497  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2498  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2499  *	it shouldn't be set.
2500  *
2501  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2502  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2503  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2504  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2505  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2506  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2507  *
2508  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2509  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2510  *
2511  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2512  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2513  *
2514  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2515  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2516  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2517  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2518  *
2519  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2520  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2521  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2522  *
2523  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2524  *
2525  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2526  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2527  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2528  *	device_timestamp.
2529  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2530  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2531  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2532  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2533  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2534  *
2535  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2536  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2537  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2538  *
2539  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2540  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2541  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2542  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2543  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2544  *	neither enabled.
2545  *
2546  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2547  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2548  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2549  *
2550  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2551  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2552  *	supported by HW.
2553  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2554  *	device.
2555  *
2556  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2557  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2558  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2559  *
2560  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2561  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2562  *
2563  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2564  */
2565 struct ieee80211_hw {
2566 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2567 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2568 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2569 	void *priv;
2570 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2571 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2572 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2573 	int vif_data_size;
2574 	int sta_data_size;
2575 	int chanctx_data_size;
2576 	int txq_data_size;
2577 	u16 queues;
2578 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2579 	s8 max_signal;
2580 	u8 max_rates;
2581 	u8 max_report_rates;
2582 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2583 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2584 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2585 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2586 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2587 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2588 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2589 	struct {
2590 		int units_pos;
2591 		s16 accuracy;
2592 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2593 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2594 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2595 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2596 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2597 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2598 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2599 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2600 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2601 	u32 max_mtu;
2602 };
2603 
2604 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2605 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2606 {
2607 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2608 }
2609 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2610 
2611 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2612 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2613 {
2614 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2615 }
2616 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2617 
2618 /**
2619  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2620  *
2621  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2622  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2623  */
2624 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2625 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2626 
2627 	/* Keep last */
2628 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2629 };
2630 
2631 /**
2632  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2633  *
2634  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2635  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2636  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2637  * @status: channel-switch response status
2638  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2639  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2640  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2641  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2642  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2643  */
2644 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2645 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2646 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2647 	u8 action_code;
2648 	u32 status;
2649 	u32 timestamp;
2650 	u16 switch_time;
2651 	u16 switch_timeout;
2652 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2653 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2654 };
2655 
2656 /**
2657  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2658  *
2659  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2660  *
2661  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2662  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2663  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2664  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2665  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2666  *
2667  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2668  */
2669 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2670 
2671 /**
2672  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2673  *
2674  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2675  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2676  */
2677 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2678 {
2679 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2680 }
2681 
2682 /**
2683  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2684  *
2685  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2686  * @addr: the address to set
2687  */
2688 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2689 {
2690 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2691 }
2692 
2693 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2694 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2695 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2696 {
2697 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2698 		return NULL;
2699 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2700 }
2701 
2702 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2703 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2704 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2705 {
2706 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2707 		return NULL;
2708 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2709 }
2710 
2711 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2712 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2713 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2714 {
2715 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2716 		return NULL;
2717 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2718 }
2719 
2720 /**
2721  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2722  * @hw: the hardware
2723  * @skb: the skb
2724  *
2725  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2726  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2727  */
2728 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2729 
2730 /**
2731  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2732  *
2733  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2734  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2735  *
2736  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2737  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2738  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2739  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2740  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2741  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2742  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2743  *
2744  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2745  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2746  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2747  *
2748  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2749  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2750  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2751  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2752  *
2753  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2754  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2755  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2756  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2757  *
2758  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2759  *
2760  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2761  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2762  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2763  * based on the receive flags.
2764  *
2765  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2766  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2767  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2768  * keys.
2769  *
2770  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2771  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2772  * handler.
2773  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2774  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2775  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2776  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2777  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2778  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2779  *
2780  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2781  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2782  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2783  *
2784  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2785  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2786  * requirements:
2787  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2788       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2789       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2790    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2791       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2792    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2793       encrypted with the new key and
2794    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2795    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2796  */
2797 
2798 /**
2799  * DOC: Powersave support
2800  *
2801  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2802  *
2803  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2804  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2805  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2806  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2807  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2808  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2809  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2810  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2811  *
2812  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2813  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2814  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2815  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2816  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2817  *
2818  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2819  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2820  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2821  *
2822  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2823  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2824  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2825  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2826  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2827  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2828  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2829  *
2830  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2831  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2832  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2833  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2834  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2835  * periods.
2836  *
2837  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2838  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2839  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2840  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2841  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2842  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2843  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2844  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2845  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2846  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2847  *
2848  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2849  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2850  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2851  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2852  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2853  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2854  *
2855  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2856  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2857  */
2858 
2859 /**
2860  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2861  *
2862  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2863  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2864  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2865  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2866  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2867  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2868  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2869  *
2870  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2871  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2872  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2873  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2874  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2875  *
2876  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2877  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2878  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2879  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2880  *
2881  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2882  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2883  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2884  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2885  *
2886  *  - a list of information element IDs
2887  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2888  *
2889  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2890  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2891  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2892  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2893  * vendor information elements.
2894  *
2895  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2896  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2897  *
2898  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2899  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2900  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2901  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2902  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2903  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2904  *
2905  *
2906  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2907  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2908  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2909  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2910  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2911  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2912  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2913  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2914  *
2915  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2916  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2917  * signal strength threshold checking.
2918  */
2919 
2920 /**
2921  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2922  *
2923  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2924  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2925  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2926  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2927  *
2928  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2929  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2930  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2931  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2932  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2933  * hardware flags.
2934  *
2935  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2936  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2937  * turned off otherwise.
2938  *
2939  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2940  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2941  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2942  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2943  */
2944 
2945 /**
2946  * DOC: Frame filtering
2947  *
2948  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2949  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2950  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2951  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2952  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2953  *
2954  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2955  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2956  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2957  *
2958  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2959  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2960  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2961  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2962  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2963  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2964  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2965  *
2966  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2967  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2968  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2969  * or dropped.
2970  *
2971  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2972  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2973  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2974  * the flag, but not clear it.
2975  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2976  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2977  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2978  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2979  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2980  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2981  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2982  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2983  */
2984 
2985 /**
2986  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2987  *
2988  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2989  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2990  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2991  *
2992  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2993  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2994  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2995  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2996  * the driver code.
2997  *
2998  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2999  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3000  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3001  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3002  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3003  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3004  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3005  *
3006  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3007  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3008  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3009  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3010  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3011  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3012  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3013  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3014  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3015  * @sta_notify callback.
3016  *
3017  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3018  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3019  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3020  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3021  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3022  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3023  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3024  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3025  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3026  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3027  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3028  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3029  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3030  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3031  *
3032  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3033  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3034  *
3035  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3036  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3037  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3038  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3039  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3040  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3041  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3042  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3043  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3044  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3045  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3046  *
3047  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3048  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3049  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3050  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3051  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3052  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3053  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3054  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3055  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3056  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3057  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3058  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3059  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3060  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3061  *
3062  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3063  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3064  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3065  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3066  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3067  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3068  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3069  *
3070  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3071  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3072  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3073  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3074  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3075  *
3076  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3077  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3078  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3079  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3080  */
3081 
3082 /**
3083  * DOC: HW queue control
3084  *
3085  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3086  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3087  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3088  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3089  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3090  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3091  *
3092  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3093  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3094  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3095  *
3096  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3097  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3098  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3099  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3100  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3101  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3102  * the hardware queue.
3103  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3104  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3105  *
3106  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3107  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3108  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3109  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3110  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3111  *
3112  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3113  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3114  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3115  * off-channel queue:         9
3116  *
3117  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3118  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3119  *
3120  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3121  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3122  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3123  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3124  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3125  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3126  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3127  *
3128  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3129  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3130  *
3131  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3132  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3133  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3134  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3135  */
3136 
3137 /**
3138  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3139  *
3140  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3141  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3142  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3143  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3144  *
3145  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3146  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3147  *	multicast address.
3148  *
3149  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3150  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3151  *
3152  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3153  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3154  *
3155  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3156  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3157  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3158  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3159  *	honour this flag if possible.
3160  *
3161  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3162  *	station
3163  *
3164  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3165  *
3166  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3167  *
3168  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3169  *
3170  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3171  */
3172 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3173 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3174 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3175 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3176 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3177 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3178 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3179 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3180 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3181 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3182 };
3183 
3184 /**
3185  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3186  *
3187  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3188  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3189  *
3190  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3191  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3192  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3193  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3194  *
3195  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3196  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3197  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3198  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3199  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3200  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3201  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3202  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3203  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3204  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3205  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3206  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3207  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3208  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3209  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3210  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3211  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3212  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3213  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3214  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3215  */
3216 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3217 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3218 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3219 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3220 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3221 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3222 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3223 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3224 };
3225 
3226 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3227 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3228 
3229 /**
3230  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3231  *
3232  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3233  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3234  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3235  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3236  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3237  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3238  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3239  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3240  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3241  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3242  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3243  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3244  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3245  */
3246 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3247 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3248 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3249 	u16 tid;
3250 	u16 ssn;
3251 	u16 buf_size;
3252 	bool amsdu;
3253 	u16 timeout;
3254 };
3255 
3256 /**
3257  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3258  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3259  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3260  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3261  */
3262 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3263 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3264 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3265 };
3266 
3267 /**
3268  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3269  *
3270  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3271  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3272  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3273  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3274  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3275  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3276  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3277  *	the peer.
3278  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3279  *	by the peer
3280  */
3281 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3282 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3283 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3284 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3285 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3286 };
3287 
3288 /**
3289  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3290  *
3291  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3292  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3293  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3294  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3295  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3296  *
3297  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3298  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3299  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3300  */
3301 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3302 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3303 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3304 };
3305 
3306 /**
3307  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3308  *
3309  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3310  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3311  *
3312  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3313  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3314  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3315  *	of wowlan configuration)
3316  */
3317 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3318 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3319 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3320 };
3321 
3322 /**
3323  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3324  *
3325  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3326  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3327  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3328  *
3329  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3330  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3331  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3332  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3333  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3334  *	Must be atomic.
3335  *
3336  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3337  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3338  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3339  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3340  *	or zero.
3341  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3342  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3343  *	is added.
3344  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3345  *
3346  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3347  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3348  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3349  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3350  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3351  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3352  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3353  *
3354  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3355  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3356  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3357  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3358  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3359  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3360  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3361  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3362  *	must return 1 from this function.
3363  *
3364  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3365  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3366  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3367  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3368  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3369  *
3370  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3371  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3372  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3373  *	in suspend().
3374  *
3375  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3376  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3377  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3378  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3379  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3380  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3381  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3382  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3383  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3384  *
3385  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3386  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3387  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3388  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3389  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3390  *
3391  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3392  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3393  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3394  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3395  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3396  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3397  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3398  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3399  *
3400  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3401  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3402  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3403  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3404  *
3405  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3406  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3407  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3408  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3409  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3410  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3411  *	can sleep.
3412  *
3413  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3414  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3415  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3416  *
3417  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3418  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3419  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3420  *
3421  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3422  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3423  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3424  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3425  *	which flags are changed.
3426  *	This callback can sleep.
3427  *
3428  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3429  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3430  *
3431  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3432  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3433  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3434  *	is enabled.
3435  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3436  *	The callback can sleep.
3437  *
3438  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3439  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3440  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3441  *	The callback must be atomic.
3442  *
3443  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3444  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3445  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3446  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3447  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3448  *
3449  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3450  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3451  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3452  *
3453  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3454  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3455  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3456  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3457  *	that power save is disabled.
3458  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3459  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3460  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3461  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3462  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3463  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3464  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3465  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3466  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3467  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3468  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3469  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3470  *	The callback can sleep.
3471  *
3472  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3473  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3474  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3475  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3476  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3477  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3478  *	The callback can sleep.
3479  *
3480  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3481  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3482  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3483  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3484  *
3485  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3486  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3487  *
3488  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3489  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3490  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3491  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3492  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3493  *
3494  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3495  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3496  *	this notification.
3497  *	The callback can sleep.
3498  *
3499  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3500  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3501  *	The callback can sleep.
3502  *
3503  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3504  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3505  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3506  *	The callback must be atomic.
3507  *
3508  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3509  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3510  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3511  *	should be set as well.
3512  *	The callback can sleep.
3513  *
3514  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3515  *	The callback can sleep.
3516  *
3517  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3518  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3519  *
3520  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3521  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3522  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3523  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3524  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3525  *	This callback can sleep.
3526  *
3527  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3528  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3529  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3530  *	callback can sleep.
3531  *
3532  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3533  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3534  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3535  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3536  *
3537  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3538  *	power for the station.
3539  *	This callback can sleep.
3540  *
3541  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3542  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3543  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3544  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3545  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3546  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3547  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3548  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3549  *	The callback can sleep.
3550  *
3551  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3552  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3553  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3554  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3555  *	in @sta_state.
3556  *	The callback can sleep.
3557  *
3558  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3559  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3560  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3561  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3562  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3563  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3564  *	Must be atomic.
3565  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3566  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3567  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3568  *
3569  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3570  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3571  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3572  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3573  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3574  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3575  *	The callback can sleep.
3576  *
3577  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3578  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3579  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3580  *	The callback can sleep.
3581  *
3582  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3583  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3584  *	required function.
3585  *	The callback can sleep.
3586  *
3587  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3588  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3589  *	required function.
3590  *	The callback can sleep.
3591  *
3592  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3593  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3594  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3595  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3596  *	The callback can sleep.
3597  *
3598  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3599  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3600  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3601  *	TSF synchronization.
3602  *	The callback can sleep.
3603  *
3604  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3605  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3606  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3607  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3608  *	The callback can sleep.
3609  *
3610  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3611  *
3612  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3613  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3614  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3615  *	The callback can sleep.
3616  *
3617  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3618  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3619  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3620  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3621  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3622  *
3623  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3624  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3625  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3626  *
3627  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3628  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3629  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3630  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3631  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3632  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3633  *	The callback can sleep.
3634  *
3635  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3636  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3637  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3638  *	completion of the channel switch.
3639  *
3640  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3641  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3642  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3643  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3644  *
3645  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3646  *
3647  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3648  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3649  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3650  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3651  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3652  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3653  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3654  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3655  *	must be accepted in this case.
3656  *	This callback may sleep.
3657  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3658  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3659  *
3660  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3661  *
3662  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3663  *
3664  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3665  *	queues before entering power save.
3666  *
3667  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3668  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3669  *	The callback can sleep.
3670  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3671  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3672  *	The callback must be atomic.
3673  *
3674  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3675  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3676  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3677  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3678  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3679  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3680  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3681  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3682  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3683  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3684  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3685  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3686  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3687  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3688  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3689  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3690  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3691  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3692  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3693  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3694  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3695  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3696  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3697  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3698  *	This callback must be atomic.
3699  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3700  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3701  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3702  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3703  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3704  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3705  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3706  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3707  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3708  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3709  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3710  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3711  *	This callback must be atomic.
3712  *
3713  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3714  *
3715  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3716  *
3717  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3718  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3719  *
3720  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3721  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3722  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3723  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3724  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3725  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3726  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3727  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3728  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3729  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3730  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3731  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3732  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3733  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3734  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3735  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3736  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3737  *
3738  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3739  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3740  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3741  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3742  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3743  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3744  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3745  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3746  *
3747  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3748  *	This callback may sleep.
3749  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3750  *	This callback may sleep.
3751  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3752  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3753  *	channel context with different settings
3754  *	This callback may sleep.
3755  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3756  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3757  *	This callback may sleep.
3758  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3759  *	unbound from vif.
3760  *	This callback may sleep.
3761  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3762  *	another, as specified in the list of
3763  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3764  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3765  *	This callback may sleep.
3766  *
3767  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3768  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3769  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3770  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3771  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3772  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3773  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3774  *
3775  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3776  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3777  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3778  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3779  *	This callback may sleep.
3780  *
3781  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3782  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3783  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3784  *
3785  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3786  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3787  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3788  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3789  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3790  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3791  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3792  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3793  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3794  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3795  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3796  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3797  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3798  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3799  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3800  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3801  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3802  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3803  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3804  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3805  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3806  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3807  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3808  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3809  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3810  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3811  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3812  *
3813  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3814  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3815  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3816  *
3817  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3818  *	and hardware limits.
3819  *
3820  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3821  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3822  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3823  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3824  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3825  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3826  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3827  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3828  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3829  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3830  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3831  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3832  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3833  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3834  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3835  *	the function call.
3836  *
3837  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3838  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3839  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3840  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3841  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3842  *
3843  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3844  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3845  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3846  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3847  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3848  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3849  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3850  *	changed parameters.
3851  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3852  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3853  *	this call.
3854  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3855  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3856  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3857  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3858  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3859  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3860  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3861  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3862  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3863  *
3864  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3865  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3866  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3867  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3868  *	This callback may sleep.
3869  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3870  *	This callback may sleep.
3871  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3872  *	4-address mode
3873  */
3874 struct ieee80211_ops {
3875 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3876 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3877 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3878 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3879 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3880 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3881 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3882 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3883 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3884 #endif
3885 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3886 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3887 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3888 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3889 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3890 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3891 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3892 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3893 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3894 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3895 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3896 				 u32 changed);
3897 
3898 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3900 
3901 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3902 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3903 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3904 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3905 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3906 				 u64 multicast);
3907 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3908 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3909 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3910 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3911 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3912 		       bool set);
3913 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3914 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3915 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3916 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3917 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3918 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3919 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3920 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3921 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3922 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3923 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3924 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3926 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3927 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3928 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3929 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3930 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3931 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3932 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3933 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3934 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3935 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3936 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3937 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3938 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3939 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3941 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3943 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3945 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3946 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3947 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3948 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3949 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3950 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3951 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3952 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3953 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3955 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3956 				struct dentry *dir);
3957 #endif
3958 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3959 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3960 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3962 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3963 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3964 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3965 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3966 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3967 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3969 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3970 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3972 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3973 			      u32 changed);
3974 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3975 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3976 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3977 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3978 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3980 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3981 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3983 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3984 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3985 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 			u64 tsf);
3987 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3988 			   s64 offset);
3989 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3990 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3991 
3992 	/**
3993 	 * @ampdu_action:
3994 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3995 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3996 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3997 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3998 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3999 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4000 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4001 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4002 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4003 	 *
4004 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4005 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4006 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4007 	 *
4008 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4009 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4010 	 *
4011 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4012 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4013 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4014 	 *
4015 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4016 	 *
4017 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4018 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4019 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4020 	 *
4021 	 * The callback can sleep.
4022 	 */
4023 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4024 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4025 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4026 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4027 		struct survey_info *survey);
4028 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4029 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4030 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4031 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 			    void *data, int len);
4033 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4034 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4035 			     void *data, int len);
4036 #endif
4037 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4039 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4041 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4042 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4043 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4044 
4045 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4047 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4048 				 int duration,
4049 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4050 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4051 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4052 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4053 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4054 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4055 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4056 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4057 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4058 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4059 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4060 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4061 
4062 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4063 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4064 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4065 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4066 				      bool more_data);
4067 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4069 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4070 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4071 					bool more_data);
4072 
4073 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4075 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4076 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4078 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4080 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4081 
4082 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4083 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4084 				  u16 duration);
4085 
4086 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4088 
4089 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4090 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4091 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4092 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4093 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4095 			       u32 changed);
4096 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4097 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4098 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4099 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4100 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4102 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4104 				  int n_vifs,
4105 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4106 
4107 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4108 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4109 
4110 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4111 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4112 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4113 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4114 #endif
4115 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4116 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4117 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4118 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4119 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4121 
4122 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4123 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4124 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4125 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4126 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4127 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4128 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4129 
4130 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4131 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4132 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4133 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4134 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4135 			   int *dbm);
4136 
4137 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4138 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4139 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4140 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4141 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4142 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4143 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4144 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4145 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4146 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4147 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4148 
4149 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4150 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4151 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4152 
4153 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4155 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4156 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4158 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4159 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4160 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4161 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4162 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4163 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4164 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4165 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4166 			    u8 instance_id);
4167 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4169 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4170 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4171 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4172 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4173 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4174 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4175 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4176 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4177 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4180 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4181 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4184 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4186 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4187 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4188 };
4189 
4190 /**
4191  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4192  *
4193  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4194  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4195  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4196  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4197  * @priv_data_len.
4198  *
4199  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4200  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4201  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4202  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4203  *
4204  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4205  */
4206 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4207 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4208 					   const char *requested_name);
4209 
4210 /**
4211  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4212  *
4213  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4214  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4215  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4216  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4217  * @priv_data_len.
4218  *
4219  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4220  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4221  *
4222  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4223  */
4224 static inline
4225 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4226 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4227 {
4228 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4229 }
4230 
4231 /**
4232  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4233  *
4234  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4235  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4236  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4237  *
4238  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4239  *
4240  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4241  */
4242 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4243 
4244 /**
4245  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4246  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4247  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4248  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4249  */
4250 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4251 	int throughput;
4252 	int blink_time;
4253 };
4254 
4255 /**
4256  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4257  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4258  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4259  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4260  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4261  */
4262 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4263 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4264 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4265 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4266 };
4267 
4268 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4269 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4270 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4271 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4272 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4273 const char *
4274 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4275 				   unsigned int flags,
4276 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4277 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4278 #endif
4279 /**
4280  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4281  *
4282  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4283  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4284  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4285  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4286  *
4287  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4288  *
4289  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4290  */
4291 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4292 {
4293 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4294 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4295 #else
4296 	return NULL;
4297 #endif
4298 }
4299 
4300 /**
4301  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4302  *
4303  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4304  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4305  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4306  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4307  *
4308  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4309  *
4310  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4311  */
4312 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4313 {
4314 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4315 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4316 #else
4317 	return NULL;
4318 #endif
4319 }
4320 
4321 /**
4322  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4323  *
4324  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4325  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4326  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4327  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4328  *
4329  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4330  *
4331  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4332  */
4333 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4334 {
4335 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4336 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4337 #else
4338 	return NULL;
4339 #endif
4340 }
4341 
4342 /**
4343  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4344  *
4345  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4346  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4347  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4348  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4349  *
4350  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4351  *
4352  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4353  */
4354 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4355 {
4356 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4357 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4358 #else
4359 	return NULL;
4360 #endif
4361 }
4362 
4363 /**
4364  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4365  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4366  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4367  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4368  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4369  *
4370  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4371  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4372  *
4373  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4374  */
4375 static inline const char *
4376 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4377 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4378 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4379 {
4380 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4381 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4382 						  blink_table_len);
4383 #else
4384 	return NULL;
4385 #endif
4386 }
4387 
4388 /**
4389  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4390  *
4391  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4392  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4393  *
4394  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4395  */
4396 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4397 
4398 /**
4399  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4400  *
4401  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4402  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4403  * before calling this function.
4404  *
4405  * @hw: the hardware to free
4406  */
4407 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4408 
4409 /**
4410  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4411  *
4412  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4413  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4414  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4415  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4416  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4417  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4418  *
4419  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4420  */
4421 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4422 
4423 /**
4424  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4425  *
4426  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4427  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4428  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4429  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4430  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4431  *
4432  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4433  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4434  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4435  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4436  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4437  *
4438  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4439  *
4440  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4441  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4442  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4443  * @list: the destination list
4444  */
4445 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4446 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4447 
4448 /**
4449  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4450  *
4451  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4452  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4453  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4454  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4455  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4456  *
4457  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4458  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4459  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4460  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4461  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4462  *
4463  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4464  *
4465  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4466  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4467  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4468  * @napi: the NAPI context
4469  */
4470 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4471 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4472 
4473 /**
4474  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4475  *
4476  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4477  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4478  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4479  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4480  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4481  *
4482  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4483  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4484  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4485  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4486  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4487  *
4488  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4489  *
4490  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4491  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4492  */
4493 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4494 {
4495 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4496 }
4497 
4498 /**
4499  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4500  *
4501  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4502  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4503  *
4504  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4505  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4506  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4507  *
4508  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4509  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4510  */
4511 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4512 
4513 /**
4514  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4515  *
4516  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4517  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4518  *
4519  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4520  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4521  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4522  *
4523  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4524  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4525  */
4526 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4527 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4528 {
4529 	local_bh_disable();
4530 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4531 	local_bh_enable();
4532 }
4533 
4534 /**
4535  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4536  *
4537  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4538  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4539  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4540  *
4541  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4542  *
4543  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4544  * each other.
4545  *
4546  * @sta: currently connected sta
4547  * @start: start or stop PS
4548  *
4549  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4550  */
4551 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4552 
4553 /**
4554  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4555  *                                  (in process context)
4556  *
4557  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4558  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4559  * applies.
4560  *
4561  * @sta: currently connected sta
4562  * @start: start or stop PS
4563  *
4564  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4565  */
4566 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4567 						  bool start)
4568 {
4569 	int ret;
4570 
4571 	local_bh_disable();
4572 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4573 	local_bh_enable();
4574 
4575 	return ret;
4576 }
4577 
4578 /**
4579  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4580  * @sta: currently connected station
4581  *
4582  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4583  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4584  * connected station was received.
4585  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4586  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4587  * be serialized.
4588  */
4589 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4590 
4591 /**
4592  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4593  * @sta: currently connected station
4594  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4595  *
4596  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4597  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4598  * from a connected station was received.
4599  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4600  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4601  * serialized.
4602  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4603  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4604  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4605  * checks.
4606  */
4607 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4608 
4609 /*
4610  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4611  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4612  */
4613 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4614 
4615 /**
4616  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4617  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4618  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4619  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4620  *
4621  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4622  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4623  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4624  *
4625  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4626  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4627  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4628  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4629  *
4630  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4631  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4632  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4633  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4634  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4635  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4636  *
4637  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4638  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4639  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4640  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4641  * use this API.
4642  */
4643 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4644 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4645 
4646 /**
4647  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4648  *
4649  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4650  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4651  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4652  *
4653  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4654  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4655  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4656  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4657  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4658  */
4659 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4660 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4661 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4662 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4663 			    int max_rates);
4664 
4665 /**
4666  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4667  *
4668  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4669  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4670  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4671  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4672  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4673  * slow stations to starve).
4674  *
4675  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4676  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4677  */
4678 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4679 					   u32 thr);
4680 
4681 /**
4682  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4683  *
4684  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4685  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4686  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4687  *
4688  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4689  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4690  * @info: tx status information
4691  */
4692 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4693 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4694 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4695 
4696 /**
4697  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4698  *
4699  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4700  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4701  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4702  *
4703  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4704  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4705  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4706  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4707  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4708  *
4709  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4710  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4711  */
4712 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4713 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4714 
4715 /**
4716  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4717  *
4718  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4719  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4720  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4721  *
4722  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4723  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4724  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4725  *
4726  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4727  * @status: tx status information
4728  */
4729 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4730 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4731 
4732 /**
4733  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4734  *
4735  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4736  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4737  * specific skbs.
4738  *
4739  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4740  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4741  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4742  *
4743  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4744  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4745  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4746  * @info: tx status information
4747  */
4748 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4749 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4750 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4751 {
4752 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4753 		.sta = sta,
4754 		.info = info,
4755 	};
4756 
4757 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4758 }
4759 
4760 /**
4761  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4762  *
4763  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4764  *
4765  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4766  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4767  * for a single hardware.
4768  *
4769  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4770  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4771  */
4772 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4773 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4774 {
4775 	local_bh_disable();
4776 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4777 	local_bh_enable();
4778 }
4779 
4780 /**
4781  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4782  *
4783  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4784  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4785  *
4786  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4787  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4788  *
4789  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4790  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4791  */
4792 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4793 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4794 
4795 /**
4796  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4797  *
4798  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4799  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4800  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4801  * 802.11 frames.
4802  *
4803  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4804  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4805  * calls in the same tx status family.
4806  *
4807  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4808  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4809  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4810  */
4811 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4812 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4813 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4814 
4815 /**
4816  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4817  *
4818  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4819  * connected STA.
4820  *
4821  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4822  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4823  */
4824 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4825 
4826 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4827 
4828 /**
4829  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4830  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4831  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4832  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4833  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4834  *	should be ignored.
4835  */
4836 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4837 	u16 tim_offset;
4838 	u16 tim_length;
4839 
4840 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4841 };
4842 
4843 /**
4844  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4845  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4846  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4847  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4848  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4849  *
4850  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4851  * obtain the beacon template.
4852  *
4853  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4854  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4855  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4856  * applicable, the CSA count.
4857  *
4858  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4859  *
4860  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4861  */
4862 struct sk_buff *
4863 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4864 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4865 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4866 
4867 /**
4868  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4869  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4870  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4871  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4872  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4873  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4874  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4875  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4876  *
4877  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4878  * obtain the beacon frame.
4879  *
4880  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4881  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4882  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4883  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4884  *
4885  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4886  *
4887  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4888  */
4889 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4890 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4891 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4892 
4893 /**
4894  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4895  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4896  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4897  *
4898  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4899  *
4900  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4901  */
4902 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4903 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4904 {
4905 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4906 }
4907 
4908 /**
4909  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4910  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4911  *
4912  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4913  * This function is called implicitly when
4914  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4915  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4916  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4917  *
4918  * Return: new countdown value
4919  */
4920 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4921 
4922 /**
4923  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4924  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4925  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4926  *
4927  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4928  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4929  *
4930  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4931  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4932  */
4933 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4934 
4935 /**
4936  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4937  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4938  *
4939  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4940  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4941  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4942  */
4943 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4944 
4945 /**
4946  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4947  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4948  *
4949  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4950  */
4951 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4952 
4953 /**
4954  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4955  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4956  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4957  *
4958  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4959  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4960  *
4961  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4962  *
4963  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4964  */
4965 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4966 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4967 
4968 /**
4969  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4970  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4971  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4972  *
4973  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4974  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4975  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4976  *
4977  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4978  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4979  *
4980  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4981  */
4982 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4983 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4984 
4985 /**
4986  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4987  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4988  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4989  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4990  *	if at all possible
4991  *
4992  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4993  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4994  * BSSID and address is used.
4995  *
4996  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4997  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4998  *
4999  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5000  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5001  *
5002  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5003  */
5004 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5005 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5006 				       bool qos_ok);
5007 
5008 /**
5009  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5010  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5011  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5012  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5013  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5014  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5015  *
5016  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5017  * hardware.
5018  *
5019  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5020  */
5021 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5022 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5023 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5024 				       size_t tailroom);
5025 
5026 /**
5027  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5028  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5029  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5030  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5031  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5032  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5033  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5034  *
5035  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5036  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5037  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5038  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5039  */
5040 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5041 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5042 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5043 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5044 
5045 /**
5046  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5047  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5048  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5049  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5050  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5051  *
5052  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5053  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5054  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5055  *
5056  * Return: The duration.
5057  */
5058 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5059 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5060 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5064  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5065  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5066  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5067  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5068  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5069  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5070  *
5071  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5072  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5073  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5074  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5075  */
5076 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5077 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5078 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5079 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5080 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5081 
5082 /**
5083  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5084  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5085  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5086  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5087  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5088  *
5089  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5090  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5091  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5092  *
5093  * Return: The duration.
5094  */
5095 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5096 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5097 				    size_t frame_len,
5098 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5099 
5100 /**
5101  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5102  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5103  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5104  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5105  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5106  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5107  *
5108  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5109  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5110  *
5111  * Return: The duration.
5112  */
5113 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5114 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5115 					enum nl80211_band band,
5116 					size_t frame_len,
5117 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5118 
5119 /**
5120  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5121  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5122  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5123  *
5124  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5125  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5126  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5127  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5128  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5129  *
5130  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5131  * frames are available.
5132  *
5133  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5134  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5135  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5136  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5137  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5138  * use common code for all beacons.
5139  */
5140 struct sk_buff *
5141 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5142 
5143 /**
5144  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5145  *
5146  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5147  *
5148  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5149  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5150  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5151  */
5152 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5153 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5154 
5155 /**
5156  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5157  *
5158  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5159  * from the given packet.
5160  *
5161  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5162  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5163  *	with this P1K
5164  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5165  */
5166 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5167 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5168 {
5169 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5170 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5171 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5172 
5173 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5174 }
5175 
5176 /**
5177  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5178  *
5179  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5180  * and transmitter address.
5181  *
5182  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5183  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5184  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5185  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5186  */
5187 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5188 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5189 
5190 /**
5191  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5192  *
5193  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5194  * in the packet.
5195  *
5196  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5197  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5198  *	encrypted with this key
5199  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5200  */
5201 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5202 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5203 
5204 /**
5205  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5206  *
5207  * @pos: start of crypto header
5208  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5209  * @pn: PN to add
5210  *
5211  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5212  * the packet payload)
5213  *
5214  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5215  * point to the crypto header)
5216  */
5217 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5218 
5219 /**
5220  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5221  *
5222  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5223  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5224  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5225  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5226  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5227  *
5228  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5229  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5230  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5231  *
5232  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5233  * can be done concurrently.
5234  */
5235 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5236 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5237 
5238 /**
5239  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5240  *
5241  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5242  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5243  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5244  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5245  * @seq: new sequence data
5246  *
5247  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5248  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5249  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5250  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5251  *
5252  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5253  * can be done concurrently.
5254  */
5255 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5256 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5257 
5258 /**
5259  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5260  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5261  *
5262  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5263  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5264  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5265  *
5266  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5267  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5268  */
5269 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5270 
5271 /**
5272  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5273  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5274  * @keyconf: new key data
5275  *
5276  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5277  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5278  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5279  *
5280  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5281  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5282  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5283  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5284  *
5285  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5286  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5287  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5288  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5289  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5290  * of the reconfiguration.
5291  *
5292  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5293  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5294  *
5295  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5296  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5297  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5298  * the key that's being replaced.
5299  */
5300 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5301 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5302 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5303 
5304 /**
5305  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5306  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5307  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5308  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5309  * @gfp: allocation flags
5310  */
5311 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5312 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5313 
5314 /**
5315  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5316  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5317  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5318  *
5319  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5320  */
5321 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5322 
5323 /**
5324  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5325  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5326  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5327  *
5328  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5329  */
5330 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5331 
5332 /**
5333  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5334  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5335  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5336  *
5337  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5338  *
5339  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5340  */
5341 
5342 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5343 
5344 /**
5345  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5346  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5347  *
5348  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5349  */
5350 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5351 
5352 /**
5353  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5354  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5355  *
5356  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5357  */
5358 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5359 
5360 /**
5361  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5362  *
5363  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5364  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5365  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5366  * any context, including hardirq context.
5367  *
5368  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5369  * @info: information about the completed scan
5370  */
5371 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5372 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5373 
5374 /**
5375  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5376  *
5377  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5378  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5379  *
5380  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5381  */
5382 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5383 
5384 /**
5385  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5386  *
5387  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5388  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5389  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5390  * while associating, for instance.
5391  *
5392  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5393  */
5394 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5395 
5396 /**
5397  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5398  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5399  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5400  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5401  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5402  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5403  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5404  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5405  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5406  */
5407 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5408 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5409 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5410 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5411 };
5412 
5413 /**
5414  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5415  *
5416  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5417  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5418  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5419  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5420  *
5421  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5422  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5423  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5424  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5425  */
5426 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5427 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5428 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5429 				  void *data);
5430 
5431 /**
5432  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5433  *
5434  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5435  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5436  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5437  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5438  * be used.
5439  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5440  *
5441  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5442  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5443  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5444  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5445  */
5446 static inline void
5447 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5448 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5449 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5450 				    void *data)
5451 {
5452 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5453 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5454 				     iterator, data);
5455 }
5456 
5457 /**
5458  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5459  *
5460  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5461  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5462  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5463  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5464  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5465  *
5466  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5467  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5468  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5469  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5470  */
5471 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5472 						u32 iter_flags,
5473 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5474 						    u8 *mac,
5475 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5476 						void *data);
5477 
5478 /**
5479  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5480  *
5481  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5482  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5483  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5484  *
5485  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5486  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5487  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5488  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5489  */
5490 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5491 					      u32 iter_flags,
5492 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5493 						u8 *mac,
5494 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5495 					      void *data);
5496 
5497 /**
5498  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5499  *
5500  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5501  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5502  * function for them.
5503  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5504  *
5505  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5506  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5507  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5508  */
5509 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5510 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5511 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5512 				       void *data);
5513 /**
5514  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5515  *
5516  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5517  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5518  *
5519  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5520  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5521  */
5522 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5523 
5524 /**
5525  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5526  *
5527  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5528  * workqueue.
5529  *
5530  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5531  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5532  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5533  */
5534 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5535 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5536 				  unsigned long delay);
5537 
5538 /**
5539  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5540  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5541  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5542  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5543  *
5544  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5545  *
5546  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5547  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5548  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5549  */
5550 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5551 				  u16 timeout);
5552 
5553 /**
5554  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5555  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5556  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5557  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5558  *
5559  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5560  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5561  * from any context.
5562  */
5563 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5564 				      u16 tid);
5565 
5566 /**
5567  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5568  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5569  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5570  *
5571  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5572  *
5573  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5574  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5575  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5576  */
5577 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5578 
5579 /**
5580  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5581  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5582  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5583  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5584  *
5585  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5586  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5587  * can be called from any context.
5588  */
5589 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5590 				     u16 tid);
5591 
5592 /**
5593  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5594  *
5595  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5596  * @addr: station's address
5597  *
5598  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5599  *
5600  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5601  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5602  */
5603 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5604 					 const u8 *addr);
5605 
5606 /**
5607  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5608  *
5609  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5610  * @addr: remote station's address
5611  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5612  *
5613  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5614  *
5615  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5616  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5617  *
5618  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5619  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5620  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5621  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5622  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5623  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5624  *      is not reliable.
5625  *
5626  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5627  */
5628 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5629 					       const u8 *addr,
5630 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5631 
5632 /**
5633  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5634  * @hw: the hardware
5635  * @pubsta: the station
5636  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5637  *
5638  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5639  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5640  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5641  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5642  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5643  *
5644  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5645  * manner.
5646  *
5647  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5648  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5649  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5650  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5651  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5652  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5653  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5654  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5655  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5656  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5657  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5658  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5659  * woke up while blocked or not.
5660  */
5661 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5662 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5663 
5664 /**
5665  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5666  * @pubsta: the station
5667  *
5668  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5669  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5670  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5671  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5672  *
5673  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5674  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5675  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5676  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5677  *
5678  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5679  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5680  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5681  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5682  */
5683 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5684 
5685 /**
5686  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5687  * @pubsta: the station
5688  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5689  *
5690  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5691  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5692  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5693  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5694  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5695  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5696  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5697  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5698  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5699  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5700  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5701  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5702  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5703  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5704  */
5705 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5706 
5707 /**
5708  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5709  *
5710  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5711  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5712  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5713  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5714  *
5715  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5716  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5717  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5718  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5719  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5720  * attempts.
5721  *
5722  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5723  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5724  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5725  * them to 0.
5726  *
5727  * @pubsta: the station
5728  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5729  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5730  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5731  */
5732 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5733 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5734 
5735 /**
5736  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5737  *
5738  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5739  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5740  *
5741  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5742  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5743  */
5744 bool
5745 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5746 
5747 /**
5748  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5749  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5750  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5751  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5752  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5753  *
5754  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5755  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5756  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5757  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5758  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5759  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5760  *
5761  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5762  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5763  * set_key callback.
5764  */
5765 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5766 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5767 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5768 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5769 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5770 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5771 				      void *data),
5772 			 void *iter_data);
5773 
5774 /**
5775  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5776  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5777  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5778  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5779  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5780  *
5781  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5782  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5783  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5784  * in removal process will be skipped.
5785  *
5786  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5787  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5788  */
5789 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5790 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5791 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5792 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5793 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5794 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5795 					  void *data),
5796 			     void *iter_data);
5797 
5798 /**
5799  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5800  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5801  * @iter: iterator function
5802  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5803  *
5804  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5805  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5806  * places while calling into the driver.
5807  *
5808  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5809  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5810  * removed.
5811  *
5812  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5813  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5814  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5815  * or not.
5816  */
5817 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5818 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5819 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5820 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5821 		     void *data),
5822 	void *iter_data);
5823 
5824 /**
5825  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5826  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5827  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5828  *
5829  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5830  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5831  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5832  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5833  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5834  * %NULL.
5835  *
5836  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5837  */
5838 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5839 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5840 
5841 /**
5842  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5843  *
5844  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5845  *
5846  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5847  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5848  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5849  */
5850 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5851 
5852 /**
5853  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5854  *
5855  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5856  *
5857  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5858  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5859  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5860  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5861  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5862  *
5863  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5864  * without connection recovery attempts.
5865  */
5866 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5867 
5868 /**
5869  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5870  *
5871  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5872  *
5873  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5874  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5875  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5876  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5877  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5878  *
5879  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5880  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5881  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5882  * disconnect normally later.
5883  *
5884  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5885  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5886  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5887  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5888  */
5889 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5890 
5891 /**
5892  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5893  *	rssi threshold triggered
5894  *
5895  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5896  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5897  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5898  * @gfp: context flags
5899  *
5900  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5901  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5902  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5903  */
5904 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5905 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5906 			       s32 rssi_level,
5907 			       gfp_t gfp);
5908 
5909 /**
5910  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5911  *
5912  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5913  * @gfp: context flags
5914  */
5915 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5916 
5917 /**
5918  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5919  *
5920  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5921  */
5922 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5923 
5924 /**
5925  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5926  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5927  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5928  *
5929  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5930  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5931  */
5932 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5933 
5934 /**
5935  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5936  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5937  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5938  *
5939  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5940  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5941  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5942  */
5943 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5944 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5945 
5946 /**
5947  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5948  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5949  */
5950 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5951 
5952 /**
5953  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5954  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5955  */
5956 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5957 
5958 /**
5959  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5960  *
5961  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5962  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5963  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5964  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5965  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5966  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5967  *
5968  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5969  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5970  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5971  */
5972 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5973 				  const u8 *addr);
5974 
5975 /**
5976  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5977  * @pubsta: station struct
5978  * @tid: the session's TID
5979  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5980  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5981  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5982  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5983  *
5984  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5985  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5986  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5987  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5988  */
5989 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5990 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5991 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5992 
5993 /**
5994  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5995  *
5996  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5997  * buffer.
5998  *
5999  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6000  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6001  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6002  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6003  */
6004 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6005 
6006 /**
6007  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6008  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6009  * @addr: station mac address
6010  * @tid: the rx tid
6011  */
6012 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6013 				 unsigned int tid);
6014 
6015 /**
6016  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6017  *
6018  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6019  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6020  * reordering.
6021  *
6022  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6023  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6024  *
6025  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6026  * @addr: station mac address
6027  * @tid: the rx tid
6028  */
6029 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6030 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6031 {
6032 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6033 		return;
6034 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6035 }
6036 
6037 /**
6038  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6039  *
6040  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6041  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6042  * reordering.
6043  *
6044  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6045  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6046  *
6047  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6048  * @addr: station mac address
6049  * @tid: the rx tid
6050  */
6051 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6052 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6053 {
6054 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6055 		return;
6056 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6057 }
6058 
6059 /**
6060  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6061  *
6062  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6063  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6064  *
6065  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6066  *
6067  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6068  * @addr: station mac address
6069  * @tid: the rx tid
6070  */
6071 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6072 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6073 
6074 /* Rate control API */
6075 
6076 /**
6077  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6078  *
6079  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6080  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6081  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6082  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6083  *	to be filled in
6084  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6085  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6086  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6087  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6088  *	RTS threshold
6089  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6090  *	if the selected rate supports it
6091  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6092  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6093  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6094  */
6095 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6096 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6097 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6098 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6099 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6100 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6101 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6102 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6103 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6104 	bool bss;
6105 };
6106 
6107 /**
6108  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6109  */
6110 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6111 	/**
6112 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6113 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6114 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6115 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6116 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6117 	 */
6118 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6119 };
6120 
6121 struct rate_control_ops {
6122 	unsigned long capa;
6123 	const char *name;
6124 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6125 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6126 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6127 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6128 
6129 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6130 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6131 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6132 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6133 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6134 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6135 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6136 			    u32 changed);
6137 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6138 			 void *priv_sta);
6139 
6140 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6141 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6142 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6143 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6144 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6145 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6146 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6147 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6148 
6149 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6150 				struct dentry *dir);
6151 
6152 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6153 };
6154 
6155 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6156 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6157 				 int index)
6158 {
6159 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6160 }
6161 
6162 static inline s8
6163 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6164 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6165 {
6166 	int i;
6167 
6168 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6169 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6170 			return i;
6171 
6172 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6173 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6174 
6175 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6176 	return 0;
6177 }
6178 
6179 static inline
6180 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6181 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6182 {
6183 	unsigned int i;
6184 
6185 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6186 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6187 			return true;
6188 	return false;
6189 }
6190 
6191 /**
6192  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6193  *
6194  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6195  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6196  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6197  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6198  *
6199  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6200  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6201  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6202  */
6203 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6204 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6205 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6206 
6207 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6208 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6209 
6210 static inline bool
6211 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6212 {
6213 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6214 }
6215 
6216 static inline bool
6217 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6218 {
6219 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6220 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6221 }
6222 
6223 static inline bool
6224 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6225 {
6226 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6227 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6228 }
6229 
6230 static inline bool
6231 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6232 {
6233 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6234 }
6235 
6236 static inline bool
6237 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6238 {
6239 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6240 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6241 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6242 }
6243 
6244 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6245 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6246 {
6247 	if (p2p) {
6248 		switch (type) {
6249 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6250 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6251 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6252 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6253 		default:
6254 			break;
6255 		}
6256 	}
6257 	return type;
6258 }
6259 
6260 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6261 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6262 {
6263 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6264 }
6265 
6266 /**
6267  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6268  *
6269  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6270  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6271  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6272  *
6273  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6274  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6275  * matching GroupId management frame.
6276  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6277  */
6278 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6279 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6280 
6281 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6282 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6283 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6284 
6285 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6286 
6287 /**
6288  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6289  *
6290  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6291  *
6292  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6293  *
6294  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6295  * applicable.
6296  */
6297 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6298 
6299 /**
6300  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6301  * @vif: virtual interface
6302  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6303  * @gfp: allocation flags
6304  *
6305  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6306  */
6307 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6308 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6309 				    gfp_t gfp);
6310 
6311 /**
6312  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6313  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6314  * @vif: virtual interface
6315  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6316  * @band: the band to transmit on
6317  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6318  *
6319  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6320  */
6321 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6322 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6323 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6324 
6325 /**
6326  * Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header of injected frames
6327  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6328  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6329  */
6330 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6331 				 struct net_device *dev);
6332 
6333 /**
6334  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6335  *
6336  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6337  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6338  *
6339  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6340  *
6341  * private:
6342  *
6343  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6344  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6345  */
6346 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6347 	u32 next_tsf;
6348 	bool has_next_tsf;
6349 
6350 	u8 absent;
6351 
6352 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6353 	struct {
6354 		u32 start;
6355 		u32 duration;
6356 		u32 interval;
6357 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6358 };
6359 
6360 /**
6361  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6362  *
6363  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6364  * @data: NoA tracking data
6365  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6366  *
6367  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6368  */
6369 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6370 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6371 
6372 /**
6373  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6374  *
6375  * @data: NoA tracking data
6376  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6377  */
6378 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6379 
6380 /**
6381  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6382  * @vif: virtual interface
6383  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6384  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6385  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6386  * @gfp: allocation flags
6387  *
6388  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6389  */
6390 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6391 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6392 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6393 
6394 /**
6395  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6396  *
6397  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6398  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6399  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6400  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6401  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6402  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6403  *
6404  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6405  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6406  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6407  *
6408  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6409  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6410  *
6411  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6412  */
6413 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6414 
6415 /**
6416  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6417  *
6418  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6419  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6420  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6421  *
6422  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6423  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6424  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6425  *
6426  * @sta: the station
6427  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6428  */
6429 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6430 
6431 /**
6432  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6433  *
6434  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6435  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6436  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6437  *
6438  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6439  *
6440  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6441  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6442  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6443  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6444  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6445  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6446  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6447  *
6448  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6449  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6450  */
6451 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6452 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6453 
6454 /**
6455  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6456  * (in process context)
6457  *
6458  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6459  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6460  *
6461  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6462  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6463  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6464  */
6465 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6466 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6467 {
6468 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6469 
6470 	local_bh_disable();
6471 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6472 	local_bh_enable();
6473 
6474 	return skb;
6475 }
6476 
6477 /**
6478  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6479  *
6480  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6481  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6482  *
6483  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6484  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6485  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6486  */
6487 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6488 
6489 /**
6490  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6491  *
6492  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6493  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6494  *
6495  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6496  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6497  */
6498 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6499 
6500 /* (deprecated) */
6501 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6502 {
6503 }
6504 
6505 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6506 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6507 
6508 /**
6509  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6510  *
6511  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6512  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6513  *
6514  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6515  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6516  *
6517  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6518  * this TXQ internally.
6519  */
6520 static inline void
6521 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6522 {
6523 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6524 }
6525 
6526 /**
6527  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6528  *
6529  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6530  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6531  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6532  *
6533  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6534  * internally.
6535  */
6536 static inline void
6537 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6538 		     bool force)
6539 {
6540 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6541 }
6542 
6543 /**
6544  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6545  *
6546  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6547  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6548  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6549  * next_txq().
6550  *
6551  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6552  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6553  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6554  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6555  * again.
6556  *
6557  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6558  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6559  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6560  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6561  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6562  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6563  *
6564  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6565  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6566  */
6567 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6568 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6569 
6570 /**
6571  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6572  *
6573  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6574  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6575  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6576  *
6577  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6578  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6579  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6580  */
6581 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6582 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6583 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6584 
6585 /**
6586  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6587  *
6588  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6589  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6590  *
6591  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6592  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6593  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6594  * @gfp: allocation flags
6595  */
6596 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6597 				   u8 inst_id,
6598 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6599 				   gfp_t gfp);
6600 
6601 /**
6602  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6603  *
6604  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6605  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6606  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6607  *
6608  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6609  * @match: match event information
6610  * @gfp: allocation flags
6611  */
6612 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6613 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6614 			      gfp_t gfp);
6615 
6616 /**
6617  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6618  *
6619  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6620  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6621  *
6622  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6623  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6624  *          information.
6625  * @len: frame length in bytes
6626  */
6627 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6628 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6629 			      int len);
6630 
6631 /**
6632  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6633  *
6634  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6635  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6636  *
6637  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6638  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6639  * @len: frame length in bytes
6640  */
6641 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6642 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6643 			      int len);
6644 /**
6645  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6646  *
6647  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6648  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6649  * hardware or firmware.
6650  *
6651  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6652  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6653  */
6654 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6655 
6656 /**
6657  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6658  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6659  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6660  *
6661  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6662  *
6663  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6664  */
6665 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6666 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6667 
6668 /**
6669  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6670  *	probe response template.
6671  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6672  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6673  *
6674  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6675  *
6676  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6677  */
6678 struct sk_buff *
6679 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6680 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6681 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6682